P. 1
Revit MEP Tutorials Metric ENG

Revit MEP Tutorials Metric ENG

|Views: 1,668|Likes:
Published by Steven Cheung

More info:

Published by: Steven Cheung on Jun 27, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

07/09/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Introduction
  • What is in the Tutorials
  • Accessing Training Files
  • Understanding the Basics
  • Understanding the Concepts
  • Using the Revit MEP User Interface
  • Parts of the Revit Interface
  • Modifying the View
  • Performing Common Tasks
  • Creating an MEP Project
  • Linking Projects
  • Creating and Applying a View Template
  • Modifying System Settings
  • Modifying General System Options
  • Specifying File Locations
  • Specifying Spelling Options
  • Modifying Snap Settings
  • Creating a Mechanical System
  • Preparing Spaces
  • Placing Spaces
  • Placing a Space in an Open Area
  • Placing a Multi-Level Space
  • Viewing Zones in the System Browser
  • Creating Zones on a Single Level
  • Creating Zones on Multiple Levels
  • Working with the Analytical Model
  • Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads
  • Creating a Zone Color Scheme
  • Creating an Airflow Schedule
  • Placing Hosted Air Terminals
  • Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
  • Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems
  • Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems
  • Manually Creating Ductwork
  • Adding Mechanical Equipment
  • Creating a Piping System
  • Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout
  • Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout
  • Adding Valves
  • Sizing Pipe
  • Inspecting the System
  • Checking Piping Systems
  • Creating an Electrical System
  • Specifying Electrical Settings
  • Defining Required Lighting
  • Creating Color Fills and Schedules
  • Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills
  • Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
  • Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles
  • Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire
  • Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire
  • Creating a Switch System
  • Creating Power Loads
  • Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service
  • Creating a Panel Schedule
  • Checking Your Design
  • Creating a Plumbing System
  • Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System
  • Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
  • Creating a Sanitary System
  • Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System
  • Refining the Sanitary Stack
  • Creating the Cold Water System
  • Creating the Hot Water System
  • Creating a Fire Protection System
  • Specifying Pipe Settings
  • Determining Zone Requirements
  • Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule
  • Adding Sprinklers
  • Completing the Fire Protection Wet System
  • Adding Vertical Supply Piping
  • Modifying Pipe Diameters
  • Documenting a Project
  • Duplicating Plan Views
  • Creating Dependent Views
  • Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser
  • Creating Callout Views
  • Creating Annotations
  • Creating Dimensions
  • Creating a Legend
  • Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail
  • Creating Detail Wiring
  • Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail
  • Drafting Detail Components

Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

Add basic MEP elements. 3 . and piping. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. fixtures. such as duct. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Germany. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Add more detailed modelling elements. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. and plumbing engineering workflows. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical panels. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. electrical.

Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you can choose to save your work. Create detail views. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. as well as how to open and save them. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. However. You do not design entire systems. When you open a training file. however. templates. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. In this exercise. For example. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. NOTE Depending on your installation. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. Create schedules. to provide a richer and more finished design. annotations. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. After completing each exercise. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you learn where the training files are located. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. views. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Contact your CAD manager for more information. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. is located and accessed in the training files location. When you install the training files as instructed. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. and tags. On the Contents tab.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. So. when you add ductwork. For example. and sheets to document the project. such as templates and families. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. your Training folder may be in a different location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system.

a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. verify that Project Files (*. 8 If you have made changes. you are prompted to save the changes. if you open settings. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. 4 Click the training file name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. scroll down. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Save.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. For File name. 3 In the right pane. For example. and click the Training Files icon. You may close the file with or without saving changes. For Files of type.rvt) is selected. double-click Imperial or Metric. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. click ➤ Save As. select the folder in which to save the new file. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.rvt and make changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. and click Open. and you can open any supported file type.rvt. Accessing Training Files | 5 . the Open dialog displays. enter the new file name.

6 .

scope. and plans. hence. every drawing sheet. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the parameter is one of association or connection. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the floor or roof remains connected. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the operation of the software is parametric. the hierarchy of elements. As you work in drawing and schedule views. 2D and 3D view. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the door retains this relationship to the partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. quantities. In the Revit MEP model.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and phases when you need it. drawings. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. sections. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. You learn the terminology. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. schedules. ■ ■ 7 . Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In this case. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. If the length of the elevation is changed. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. drawing sheets. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. If you move the partition.

walls and ceilings are hosts. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. For example. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. levels. sprinklers. ducts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and 2D detail components. sinks. grids. They display in relevant views of the design. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sinks.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ducts. tags. and electrical panels. They help to describe or document the design. boilers. boilers. filled regions. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sprinklers. and reference planes are datum elements. When you change something. For example. and electrical panels. For example. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and keynotes are annotation elements. tags. dimensions. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. In Revit MEP. schedules.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. section views. In other cases. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. elevation views. and types. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. from geometry to construction data. you can explicitly control them. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and ceilings. views of the project. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. and drawings of the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. By using a single project file. families. This information includes components used to design the model. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. and so forth). Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. first floor. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. North . However. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. If you can draw. Most often. you do nothing to establish these relationships. programming is not required. top of wall. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. For example. such as roofs. The project file contains all information for the building design. Often. To place levels. floors.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Project: In Revit MEP. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. or bottom of foundation. for example. you must be in a section or elevation view. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.

Type: Each family can have several types. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. identical use. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. A type can be a specific size of a family. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. However. hiding. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and wires. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example. Unlike system and standard component families. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. System families can be transferred between projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and similar graphical representation. With a few clicks. A type can also be a style. or layer the views to see only the one on top. pipes. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families include ducts. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. Then experiment with them. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. For example. such as a A0 title block. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. showing. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families.

Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To return the panel to the ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop.

There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and for switching views. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for running analysis on the current design. project and system parameters. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for adding 2D information to a design.. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for editing existing elements. then select what you want to modify. When working on the Modify tab.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and CAD files. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. data and systems. select the tool first. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and settings. architect-specific tools. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.

Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides access to common tools. To keep a panel expanded. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. provides requested information. when adding duct. displays frequently used tools. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. closes the application menu (double-click). Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. For example. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. By default. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command.

(New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu... (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. click. (Open) save the current drawing. select a file to open. such as Export and Publish. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to... (Save As) export the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. select a template and create a new drawing.

.. To enable or disable a tool item. provides views including Default 3D. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Licensing) close the file.On the application menu. but is not enabled by default. Camera. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. to. (Publish) print the current drawing. and Walkthrough. click. family... annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Print) access product and license information. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. publish the current project. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. or template file. saves a current project. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. family. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file.

Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. or the Family Editor. Modify. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. check the Status Bar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. However. Group. When you are using a command. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. workshared components. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. repeat the command. Clipboard. When you are highlighting an element or component. displaying the same information.To undo or redo a series of operations. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Starting with the most recent command. when you switch to another editing mode. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. To show the Status Bar again. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. In addition. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. To hide the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. This displays the command history in a list.

do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. click (Modify). When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. On the Quick Access toolbar.To cancel or exit the current command. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. select one or more elements of the same category. To change existing elements to a different type. for example. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.

For example. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. After you are familiar with these tasks. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. There are several ways to access zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 1 Click ➤ Open.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the following steps.

Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 9 To display SteeringWheels. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. In the drawing area. 6 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. this is referred to as a crossing selection. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE As you zoom in and out. on the Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. Modifying the View | 19 . When you release the mouse button. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). If you do not have a wheel mouse.

14 To exit the wheel. Click and drag to orbit the design. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. For more information about SteeringWheels. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. As you move the mouse. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. ➤ Options. press ESC. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. and then using the Zoom tool again. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. click the SteeringWheels tab.

it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown.Design. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and open Level 2 . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Small blue dots. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. After you are familiar with these tasks. Similar controls. and select the duct. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display along the ends. These are the drag controls. referred to as shape handles. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. bottoms. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. called drag controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. 2 Enter ZR. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. 3 Click and drag the bottom control.

click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the Undo command. In this example. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All changes you make to a project are tracked. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. select the first item in the list. Move. 6 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or press CTRL+Z.

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . In this case. you want to move the duct.Some commands. 11 With the duct already selected. The duct is moved to the new position. click to specify the starting position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. for example. such as Move and Copy. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and drag it to the left as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.End a command Some commands. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. such as the Modify Ducts command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 14 Enter VG. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Supply. Select Mechanical . Press ESC twice.Return. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. For example. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Click OK. 13 To end a command.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

Finally.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. In that case. and modify system settings.rte template. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. system families. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. create and manage views. and open Metric ➤ Templates. You can choose from several templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and geometry from the starting template. 5 In the New Project dialog. such as coordination review and interference checking. settings. 6 Click OK. such as ducts and pipes. under Create new. the default building levels and standard views. You can either select a template from the template library. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and open North. you learn how to start a project from a template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog. and loadable families. 27 . use copy/monitor. link files. click Browse. New projects inherit all the families. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. such as the default project units and settings. select Project. click Training files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 7 In the Project Browser. under Template file. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise.

Click OK twice. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select School or University. select Project template. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. NH. under Energy Analysis. navigate to Metric Templates. select Level 1. review the construction materials listed. click (Browse). To maintain office standards and reduce rework.8 In the drawing area. Click Cancel. In the Choose Template dialog. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. create another new project using the Construction template. ■ For Building Construction. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ Under Create new. you can select it now. 10 Using the same method. click Browse. When you select the material. click Edit. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.rte template and click Open. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. If you want to use a template other than the default. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. for City. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. select Manchester. For example. Click OK. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. (Browse). and select the Systems-Default_Metric. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. for Energy Data. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. For Location.

select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. piping. Click OK twice. After standard settings have been established for an organization.00 mm.00 mm.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 260. 33 Click OK.00 mm. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select Identity Data. 290. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and fire protection systems. 24 In the right pane. for 20. 110.00 mm. and 310. click Rectangular. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Holding CTRL. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.00 mm.rfa and click Open. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.000 mm. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Round. under Duct Settings. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 90. 23 In the left pane. and demand factors for electrical systems. click Wiring. plumbing. and 140. 140. select Views.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. 110. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. for 90. 22 In the right pane. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 27 Click OK. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. under Pipe Settings.00 mm. For Categories.00 mm. power distribution systems. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. wiring. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.00 mm. 26 In the right pane. click Sizes. 25 In the left pane.

An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. To enable this coordination. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. For Then by. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. families. select Sub-Discipline. select View Name. and groups that are contained in a project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Family and Type. click Training. Click Open. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 2 In the New Project dialog. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. From the Positioning list. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. click Browse. For Sort by. In addition. select Project. Notice that the file is saved as a template. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Associated Level. under Create new. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. You need to create the MEP model for the project.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.rvt. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Origin to Origin. Linking Projects In this exercise. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. under Template file. 4 In the New Project dialog. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Then by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Auto . 38 Close the file. 5 Click OK. sheets.

select the linked architectural model. select Room Bounding. under Constraints. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 8 If necessary.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active.Mech. Linking Projects | 31 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area.

17 On the Options Bar. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. click Plan View types.Floor. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. click the level line for 03. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

34 On the Basics tab. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Custom. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. After copying. indicating that a relationship is established. warnings notify you of any violations. 29 In the drawing area. If you modify a monitored element. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. level 3. Linking Projects | 33 . of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. highlight the linked model. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. and the level 4. click By Host View. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. for the link file. and click to select the linked model. 27 In the drawing area. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. appears above the copied elements. a warning message displays. indicating that an element has changed. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. and that the copied elements are monitored. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. select Custom. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.

3 In the View templates dialog. Under Visibility. Planting. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. select Custom. Click OK. Roads. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Site. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. deselect Levels. Click OK. 5 On the Basics tab. click Custom. click Edit. Under Visibility. enter Mechanical View and click OK. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 7 Click OK twice. under View Properties. for Name. click Custom. deselect Parking. for the link file. 2 In the New View Template dialog. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 36 Click OK.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. Select Show categories from all disciplines.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. and Topography.

click Browse. Modifying System Settings | 35 . journal cleanup options. These settings control the graphics. Modifying System Settings In this exercise.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Notice that the drawing area is black. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. and click OK.rte. under Template file. click Training Files. click the Graphics tab. notification preferences. 9 In the Options dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog. selection default options. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. under View Templates. select Invert background color. 8 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Colors. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 7 Click OK. click the Graphics tab. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. select Mechanical and click OK. and your username when using worksharing. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. they are not saved to project files or template files.

20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. select One hour. However. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. select None. 21 Close the file without saving it. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 2 In the Options dialog. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. including your default project template. 13 Under Notifications. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. When an error occurs. 11 In the Color dialog. select yellow. click the File Locations tab. the elements causing the error display using this color. and click OK. you specify default file locations. and family libraries. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 14 Click OK. family template files. 12 Click the General tab. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .10 Under Colors. For Tooltip assistance. 18 Select the wall. click the value for Selection color. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element.

It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However. and click Open. and Import dialogs. Click and click Browse to select a template. 7 In the Options dialog. 8 Click Cancel. When you are opening. select the folder to save your files to by default. 10 In the Places dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Specifying File Locations | 37 . note the list of library names. such as in a large. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. You can modify the existing library names and path. and you can create new libraries. under Default path for family template files. TIP To view a template. click Browse. centralized. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. saving. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files.3 Under Default template file. click Places. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 4 Click Cancel. Save. In the following illustration. Load. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. or loading a Revit MEP file. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click Browse. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. you can start a new project with that template.

➤ Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click My Library. Load. click (Add Value). or families. and select it as the library path.11 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. templates. 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and change the name to My Library. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. Save. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click the My Library icon. and click OK twice. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.

10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 27 Click OK.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. select Ignore words in uppercase. 22 Select My Library. (Remove Value) to delete the library. specify the new location here. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 In the Options dialog. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. and decal image files. This path is determined during installation. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 5 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 19 Click Cancel. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 9 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Places. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 21 On the File Locations tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 Click 24 Click OK. If you work in a large office. If you want to relocate this path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. such as bump maps. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. view the current path. click the Spelling tab. 3 Under Settings. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 20 Click ➤ Options. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. custom color files.

click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Browse. click the Spelling tab. click Close. 22 In the text editor. In this exercise. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 23 In the text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Training Files. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 19 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.17 In the Spelling dialog.. 4 In the New Project dialog. and enter 500 . and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. under Dimension Snaps. under Template file. click Edit. work with snapping turned off. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. you modify snap increments. You can turn snap settings on and off. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Restore Defaults. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 20 Under Settings. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 18 Click ➤ Options. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings.rte. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the New Project dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 10 On the Options Bar. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. snapping reverts to the system default settings. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. and move the cursor to the right.7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. For example. If you do not have a wheel button. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. zoom out until it does so. deselect Chain. use the wheel button on your mouse. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. click OK. If it does not. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. enter SM. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall.

19 Enter SM. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 26 Close the file. it will snap to the endpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that snapping is once again active. 22 Move the cursor downward. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the midpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and specify the wall endpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 25 Click OK. Do not set the wall end point. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and delete the value 500 .. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. with or without saving it. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you will understand the process. After finishing each exercise.autodesk. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you design a mechanical system for an office building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you can choose to save your work.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. 45 . go to http://www. water source heat pump (WSHP). This system consists of a cooling tower. As you create the mechanical system. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. If the tutorial training files are not present. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. methodology. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you first plan the system. and then you create a plenum level. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you first configure the linked architectural model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. At the end of the tutorial. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. By following the recommended workflow. However. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

Next. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. select Room Bounding. click Training Files. ceilings. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. roof. 6 In the Project Browser. you add a level for plenums. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and double-click West . In this section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .MEP. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and after the linked model highlights. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m.rvt. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. not in the MEP training file. under Constraints.

enter 2600mm. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. For Offset. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). right-click Level 2 Plenum. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. and in the Plan View Types dialog. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Click Plan View Types. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 9 On the Draw panel. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. The new level is placed. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 16 Press Esc. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and click OK. and click Properties. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and enter Level 2 Plenum. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.

Under View Depth. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In this exercise. Under Extents. However. select MEP . 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Cut plane. and click Apply Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you can choose to save your work. Under Identity Data. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Plenum Plan. for View Range. for Default View Template. For View Classification. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for Top. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. NOTE After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. enter 0. select Design. enter an Offset of 300mm.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . and for Offset. for Level. select Level Above (Level 3).Plenum. ■ Click OK twice. In this exercise. In the next exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. for View Scale. 20 In the Project Browser. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and then place spaces in various types of areas. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. click Edit.

■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. enter 0. For Upper Limit.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing Spaces | 49 . walls. For Offset. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For (Tag Location). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level 2 Plenum.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. select Horizontal. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select New. and ceilings). For Space. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.

ensuring coordination between the files. 14 In the drawing area. For Name. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Click OK. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for Number. enter 219.7 Click to place the space.

Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and then click Modify. enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. you place a space in a large corridor area.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. and for Offset. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and then press Esc. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Upper Limit. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar.

and select Corridor. 9 In the schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 10 Click in the number column. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click in the name column. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.7 In the Project Browser. In the schedule. and change the space number to 216A.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. as shown. 11 Close the schedule view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 15 Press Esc twice. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.

16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. If necessary. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

enter 0. and click Element Properties. select Roof Level. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. expand Spaces. 12 Click in the section view. for Upper Limit. and then click OK. In the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase.4 Press Esc. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select the space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click. For Offset. for Upper Limit. 6 Enter VG. 10 In the plan view. On the Options Bar. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select Interior and Reference. select Level 3. click in the chase area to place the space. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view.

Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . All spaces in the view are tagged. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter 1200. enter Chase. Under Identity Data. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Bounding elements (such as walls. 17 Type ZF. and maximize the view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. for Name.Space Plan. enter 225PC.■ For Limit Offset. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . For Number. under Loaded Tags. ceilings. 15 Press Esc. floors. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume.

verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Reference. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.20 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . To display space reference lines. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.Zoning is highlighted. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. After a space is placed in an area. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Spaces. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. click Training Files. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. In the next exercises. which removes the space from the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.

the Edit Zone tab displays. click Reference. under Spaces. ) or 5 In the System Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. As you do this. The Zone tool is active.rvt. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. double-click 121 Cafeteria. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Energy Analysis. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Next. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify the zones in the System Browser. click Training Files. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . indicating that the space is occupiable. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. To display space reference lines. you assign spaces to a zone. and a new zone is created. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). you assign spaces to zones in the building. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.Zoning is highlighted. select Occupiable. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.

select HVAC Zones. 4 In the drawing area. 5 With the drawing area active. and Electrical 220 spaces. select Computer Lab 222. and modify the zone properties. To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK. you need to activate the zone visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Instruction 221. and click Finish Editing Zone. you can add or remove a space from the zone. In the System Browser.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Expand HVAC Zones. Instruction. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. type VG. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Using the Edit Zone tab. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.West . 9 In the System Browser.Zoning. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.West . To display space reference lines. 11 Close the System Browser. and click OK. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. and verify the zone in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click in the Level 1 . click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). indicating that it’s the active view. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Zoning view to activate it. for Name. under Spaces. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In this exercise.TIP After you finish editing the zone. under Identity Data. expand 2 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.rvt. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Area B. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. enter 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. click Training Files.

13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 15 Press Esc. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Verify that the distance is 12mm. Select Attached End. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 .Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. zoom out.

and click OK. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . and zone information.Zoning view. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name Value. enter Lounge . Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. click Training Files. you verify the building. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.East. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. on the ViewCube. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. double-click the zone tag. Front. and select 109 Lounge.Zoning to make it the active view. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. space. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.rvt. In this exercise. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Wireframe is selected. click the corner where the Top.

Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. With 109 Lounge selected.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. click (Isolate). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ Click (Highlight). ■ ■ On the Details tab. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. Next. select 1_South_Area C.

Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. verify that <Building> is selected. scroll down in the left pane. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . the space information displays for the selected space. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and click OK. and humidification set point. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that 21. and dehumidification set point. click .22 °C : N/A is specified. the zone information displays for the selected zone. outdoor air per area. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. click (Shading). select 109 Lounge. For People.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and then click OK. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. For Electrical Loads. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click . you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Next. This indicates the heating set point. ■ ■ ■ Next. and air changes per hour. verify that 23. select Lounge/Recreation. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. cooling air temperature. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. This indicates the cooling set point. For Cooling Information.22 °C : N/A is specified. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space.33 °C : 12. heating air temperature. For Heating Information. This indicates the outdoor air per person. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For Construction Type. Next.11 °C : 32. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. click . and in the People dialog.

15 In the Project Browser. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. click Cancel. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. floors.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. open MEP . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. For Offset. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. select Level 3. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 0. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. and other room-bounding components. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. roofs.

and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Plenum. space. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you verified building. and zone information. and select space Plenum 212P. For Name. for Number. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Click OK. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and verify that the space has replaced the void. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. In this exercise. Under Energy Analysis.

For Sliver Space Tolerance. NH. verify that Manchester. click Training Files. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. you need to select this option. is selected. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Location. verify that Level 1 is selected. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 03101. For Project Phase. For Export Complexity. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. In order to select a space. For Ground Plane. For Building Construction. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.Space Plan. right-click. click Edit. for Building Service. Click OK twice. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. On the Place tab. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. this option adjusts the times automatically. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified.rvt. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and click OK. If. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click in the Value field. under Energy Analysis. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. select School or University. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Postal Code. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Volume Computations. for Energy Data. 8 In the drawing area. for City. verify that New Construction is selected. On the Weather tab. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. double-click Level 2 . verify that 300 is specified. verify that <Building> is specified. select space Library 219. and click OK.

If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Library . it should be corrected before you calculate loads. a cooling load. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. NH. for Values. select Specified. enter 60 W. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. For Condition Type.Audio Visual. for Values. For Space Type. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. For Location. verify that Manchester. Select the space associated with the warning. and click to learn the cause for the warning. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. verify that Occupiable is selected. and then click . click in the Value column. Click OK. select Heated and cooled. and enter 15 sq. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). 12 Click the Details tab. enter 45 W. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Actual. and click OK. is specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. m. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. You have verified the building information. for Values. or neither. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For People. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. both. click Edit. For Latent. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Sensible. Select Area per person. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. for Values. select Specified. Click OK twice. Next. For Building Service. Under Power. click Edit. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Actual. verify that <Building> is specified. For Building Construction.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that School or University is selected.

weather. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. and zone information for the building model. select 219 Library.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. and under Heating Information. 17 In the loads report. click Calculate. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. select 219 Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click Information). you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and can be modified here. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click OK. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. In this exercise. There should be no warnings displayed. and click OK. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. under Energy Analysis. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 16 After you review the loads report.Space Plan. You should correct the space error in the building model. or zone information. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. or make any changes to the model. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 15 Review the loads report for project. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods.11°C. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. space. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and a loads report displays. space. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to the right of the building to place the legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the drawing area. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. Click OK.rvt. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. click Training Files. in relatively small increments.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. select HVAC Zones. 5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. For Color Scheme.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. under Schemes. The new scheme displays in the view. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color scheme legend. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Cooling Load . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Expanded Ranges. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. 11 Using the method learned previously. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m.rvt. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. click Training Files. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.

Click OK. more category options are available. For Type. select Spaces. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. For Formula. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. and then click . enter Space Airflow Schedule. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Air Flow. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Spaces. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Under Available fields. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. In the Fields dialog. for Formula. enter .Space Fill is the active view. select HVAC. For Phase. For Discipline.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the Calculated Value dialog. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Name.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. for Select available fields from. and click OK. Select Formula. select New Construction. Select Schedule building components. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. click (Browse). enter Airflow Delta. If you select Show categories from all disciplines.

select Level. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. Under Conditions to Use. verify that Show is highlighted. right-click to access schedule properties. Select Ascending. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and then select Hidden field. and Blank line. For Then by. ■ The schedule displays. For Background Color. select Not Between. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. select red. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. click the color swatch. In the Color dialog. select Level. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and then click Conditional Format. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. For Value. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. For Fields. a view opens that contains the selected space. and click OK. Click OK twice. Header. select Number. select Airflow Delta.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.

This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In this exercise. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next lesson. In later exercises. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces.

you size ductwork and validate your air system design.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and work with the airflow schedule. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. In this lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After system creation. As you place the air terminals. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you will create supply air systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

click Training Files. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and scroll to space 223. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 In the ceiling view. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.rvt. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

verify that Constrain is cleared. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and press Enter. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 9 On the Placement panel. enter 215 L/s. type 3600.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the hosted elements are updated as well. select the diffuser. for Flow. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and then press Esc to end the command. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Also. and select M_Supply Diffuser . If the host element is modified or moved. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. click Place on Face. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 17 Move the cursor down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.

you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser .Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click Open. 24 In the Open dialog. clear Leader. and then press Esc. 22 In the drawing area. Next. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 28 On the Placement tab. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag.rfa. As you place the return diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. select one of the diffusers. click Yes. as shown. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 25 In the drawing area. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. 21 On the Options Bar.

31 In the alert dialog. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. under Other. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . select Strong Reference. click Yes. select one of the return diffusers. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click to select the lines. as shown. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Level.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. and then press Esc twice. 43 Using the same method. align the other return diffuser. as shown. select the vertical grid line as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 40 In the drawing area. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

As you place the air terminals. 47 Using the same method. for Flow. clear LeftArrow. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.44 While pressing Ctrl. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. select both return diffusers. and on the Options Bar. under Mechanical. enter 310 L/s. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. and click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. and click Element Properties. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and press Enter.

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. 2 On the View Control Bar. at the lower left corner of the building. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. expand HVAC . click Training Files. select M_Supply Diffuser . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Plan .Design to make it the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 10 In the drawing area. and double-click Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . verify that Tag on Placement is selected. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. click 1 : 100. the space crossing lines display.200 Neck. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. for Scale.

As a result. By copying the diffuser. enter 170 L/s. type 6000. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Also. and then press Enter. enter 2400. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used.Airflow. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. for Flow. Click OK. move the cursor down. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. under Constraints. Under Mechanical . ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. for Offset. 15 Press Esc. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. 11 Select the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. clear Leader. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .16 Using the same method. and then press Esc. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. it is a negative value. double-click System Type. 27 In the schedule. for Sort by. select 21. and Flow. Type. for Embedded Schedule. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Category. tile the windows. select Mark. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . click Edit. enter 210 L/s. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Air Terminals.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. 29 Using the same method. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. and then right-click in the schedule. mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. Mark. and press Enter. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Available Fields. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. for Flow. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. under Other. type. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. 26 Using the method learned previously. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. under space 115. and click View Properties. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. Next.

As you highlight the zone. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. and maximize Level 1 .HVAC Plan . 31 In the drawing area.Design.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. as shown. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.

Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.Horizontal . 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.7-18 kW . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.High Efficiency .43 W (approximately 1.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .3 times the heating load). and under Energy Analysis. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 36 In the drawing area. select M_WSHP .

HVAC Plan . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. including energy analysis. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. 44 Zoom in to space 115. In this exercise. 6 Keep the System Browser open. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. After creating the logical connection. and click View ➤ Systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Design ➤ HVAC . you also use the System Browser to validate systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. However. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. the space crossing lines display. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then create the logical connection between the system components. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.rvt. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. right-click the title. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. enter . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m.Design is highlighted.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. and click OK. When you highlight a space. As you add diffusers to systems. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder.

These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Connect Into. System Name. 11 In the drawing area. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the system connects them. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 15 Click Cancel. the air terminals are the children. the number of elements is updated. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 12 In the System Browser. 17 Using the method learned previously. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 18 Click OK. and Flow value. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. review the Number of Elements. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. On the Options Bar. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1.

In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Mechanical. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 25 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. under Identity Data. for System Name. click Training Files. 22 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.Rename the system Next. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. for Mark.rvt. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties.

enter 3000. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Select Branch. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. select Flex Duct Round : Flex .Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. For Duct Type. In this case. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). A Generate Layout tab displays. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and display solution 1. For Duct Type.Round. For Offset. 4 In the drawing area. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Solution Type. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the space crossing lines display. enter 3000. click Settings. the Network type provides several solutions. select Network.Design is highlighted. select the upper left diffuser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 5 On the Options Bar. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . For Flex Duct Type. Also. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.HVAC Plan. which provides various layout tools.

All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. you’ll get an error in a later step.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. select a different layout solution. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. Either relocate the system components. For example. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. 11 Click Finish Layout. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. as shown. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Modify. Click OK. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 900.

press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. and click to select it. Usually. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. a disconnection exists. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. fittings. and equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme.Flow.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and click OK. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. The first time you press Tab. highlight a segment of the main duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. If the entire network does not highlight. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. for Color Scheme. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. select Duct Color Fill .

and press Enter. and click OK. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select By View. select one of the diffusers in the system.Airflow. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Mechanical . and on the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. for Flow. for Values Displayed.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and then click OK. 20 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. but not all values are used in this view. under Graphics.

Under Constraints. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Click OK. and then click to select it.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.Velocity. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and drag it to the right. select Friction. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Select Only. select Calculated Size Only. and select 400. and enter . The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . for Branch Sizing. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Select Restrict Height. 26 Click OK.65 Pa/m. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. click Cancel. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). highlight a segment of the duct. select the color scheme legend. for Schemes. select Duct Color Fill . Select the upper segment of main duct. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.

and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Using this tool. static pressure. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Use the information that displays (flow. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.The ductwork and fittings are updated.

Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. also known as the critical path. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.rvt. 35 Click Finish. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.

and click to specify the end of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select the WSHP. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design is highlighted.

and click Draw Duct. 15 On the ViewCube. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click the connector grip. enter 3000. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. for Offset. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. double-click MEP . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . NOTE When drawing duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Front. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. click the corner where the Top.3D MEP. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. select the top right diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.22 Using the same method. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and then click Modify. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split.

and click to select it. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click OK. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.Airflow. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. clear Restrict Height. such as a plenum. for Flow. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. select a segment of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 40 Using the same method. under Constraints.

108 .

Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you place mechanical equipment. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. including 2 base mounted pumps. Create return and supply piping systems. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Then. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. on level 3 of the building model. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. 109 . Automatically and manually lay out piping. In this lesson.

as shown. and select M_WSHP . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. click Training Files.Left Return . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . in corridor 328. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Horizontal High Efficiency .HVAC Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.rvt.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.7-18kW .Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.

you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. verify that Wall faces is selected. click the top edge of the WSHP. and enter 600. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 10 Select the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the dimension. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Click the corridor wall face. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.) 14 Click Modify. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector. select the 2 WSHPs. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

for Offset. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.75 L/s. Click OK. 21 Click Modify. as shown. Under Mechanical. enter 2750. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 0. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.

you create the return and supply piping systems. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. analyses cannot be performed. Unlike logical connections (systems). but without a corresponding system. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. You can create pipes to connect system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components.

click Training Files. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. This display indicates that the system is selected. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Mech 330). indicating that it’s the active view. select the 2 WSHPs. while pressing Ctrl. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.HVAC Plan . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. where it is easier to review the information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. and click View ➤ Piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you assign equipment to systems. right-click the Systems column heading. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. In the System Browser. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating a Piping System | 115 .rvt. 5 In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Assigning a system component to an existing system. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Therefore. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations.

You have created the hydronic return system. 10 On the Options Bar.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 13 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name. Notice that on the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. and the Edit System tool is not active. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select the boiler. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.

In heating mode. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 25 Select the boiler. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.Design. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 22 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click OK.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. and select the cooling tower. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and bypasses the cooling tower. under Design ➤ HVAC . double-click Roof . 26 Click Finish Editing System. 23 Close the roof plan view. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. In cooling mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.HVAC Plan .

The hydronic supply system highlights in red. You also manually modify the layout path as required. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 29 Right-click CHWS. 32 In the System Browser. enter 0. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. expand Piping. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click Select. including the flow rate and size of the component. In the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you can view several parameters. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. for Water Flow. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. under Mechanical. 28 Using the same method. and click Properties.8. and click Column Settings. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Expand All. indicating the logical connection.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. click Check None. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Training Files. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and click OK.Mech 330). When you draw a box to select components. then the Select a System dialog displays.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 5 In the Filter dialog. select Mechanical Equipment. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. press Tab to highlight the system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the boiler. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . you can place the cursor over a system component. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). indicating that it’s the active view. and click to select it.Design is highlighted.rvt. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. A system preview displays in red.

■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. For Inset.9 In the Select a System dialog. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. duct. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. select Perimeter. structural beams. 11 On the Options Bar. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select CHWR. verify that Solutions is selected. enter 450. It does not reference the architecture. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 13 Click Cancel. or architectural components. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 10 Click OK.

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. With each Tab. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 17 Optionally. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.75 L/s. to display the path with thinner lines. 19 In the drawing area. the flow for each WSHP is 0.

notice that the Water Flow is 1. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and access its instance properties. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. and click OK.75 L/s).50 L/s.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.50 L/s. verify that the value for Flow is 1. under Mechanical. 23 Under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. 24 Press Esc.

31 Close the Level 1 plan view.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Logically. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . On the Options Bar. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 27 On the System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . the Number of Elements is now 8. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. click Edit System. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. double-click Level 1 . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.

Next. as shown.94 L/s. you physically close the CHWR loop. 38 Using the same method. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.94 L/s.44 L/s.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. so the total flow of 6. which propagates flow throughout the system. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. and click Cancel. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 35 Using the drag control. access its instance properties. under Mechanical. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. note that the value for Flow is 4. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.50 L/s. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.

select CHWS. Click Settings. select a WSHP. 40 In the Select a System dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. enter 450. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 0. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS).00%. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 41 Click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. and then click OK. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. For Slope.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. For Inset.

) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Both sections are at the same elevation. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. as shown. 46 Click Modify. 48 While pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.

select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 51 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. To create the piping system. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 50 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. or offset elevations are incorrect. as shown.49 Select the 4-way arrow control.

Design is highlighted. double-click 3D Building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . as shown. As you work in the training file. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. indicating that it’s the active view. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ 3D Views. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. select the section of piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. as shown. 7 In the plan view.

■ Click to move the piping. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and press Esc to clear the selection. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm.

select the boiler.11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click Draw Pipe. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the return pipe riser. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The connections are automatically created. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view.

enter 381. enter 600.In a plan view. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and you select 1 connector. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and press Enter. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and the appropriate fittings are created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. 18 Press Esc twice. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 19 In the plan view. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. As you place piping runs that are close together. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you select the tee fitting. and select it. as shown. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe.

and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.

29 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. select the primary base mounted pump.28 Press Esc. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. enter 1200. 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe.

Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . enter 2850. and press Enter. type 300. and click to create the pipe.

you validate the flow through the system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. Next.

select the cooling tower. Connect the cooling tower Next. right-click. notice that Flow is 6. The flow is being propagated through the piping. and click OK. and click Element Properties. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 40 Click Cancel. as shown. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .44 L/s). under Mechanical. 41 Using the same method. under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. right-click. 42 Click OK. view the properties for the secondary pump. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 48 In the plan view. notice that under Mechanical. In the Instance Properties dialog.50 or 50% of the Flow.44 L/s. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 46 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 44 In the 3D view. which is rounded up to 3. When you create the pumps in parallel. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. for Cooling Water Flow. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. the value is 0 L/s.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 43 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

44 L/s. 49 Press Esc. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 50 In the 3D View. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. select the cooling tower. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .

52 Close the file with or without saving it. and is heated by the boiler. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). the water bypasses the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. When the valve is open.rvt.HVAC Plan . Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted.

The bypass valve is closed by default.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. and select M_Ball Valve . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. Adding Valves | 145 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 8 Press Esc twice.4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Select M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. place another M_Ball Valve .

verify that Flow is 0 L/s. and click Element Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 6. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. and click OK. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown.44 L/s. under Mechanical. right-click. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. Adding Valves | 147 .15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 19 Using the same method.

■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. In heating mode. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.44 L/s. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select M_Ball Valve . Initially. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files.44 L/s. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve . You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 20 Select the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 6. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 22 Using the method you just learned. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.

7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. and click OK.Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.HVAC Plan . Sizing Pipe | 149 . 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. for Schemes. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. click Pipe Color Fill . select Pipe Color Fill . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Flow. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. indicating that it’s the active view.Size.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.5 m/s. enter 1. for Branch Sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or manually modify the pipe. Under Constraints. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Either relocate the system components. and for Velocity. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. and click to select the branch. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Friction. 13 Press Esc. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Select And. Click OK.

2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. Using the System Inspector. and double-click 3D Building. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. pressure.14 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Inspecting the System | 151 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.Design ➤ 3D Views. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. click Training Files. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

An inspection flag reports the section number. as required.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and pressure information including pressure loss. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as shown. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow. This information helps you modify the system design.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Static Pressure is 41916.rvt.4 Pa. and double-click Level 3 .HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.1 Pa. Warnings display. you need to validate them. select 32° C. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125.7. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 9 Using the same method. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.Design.0 L/s. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. for Fluid Temperature. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. In this exercise. and click OK. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. inspect Section 6 again. targeting those systems that need attention. and to size pipe. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. click Training Files.Note that the Flow is 1. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.

NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 9 Right-click CHWS. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. In the System Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 7 In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. thus assigning the components to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and click Show to view all of the system components. For example. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. As you learned when placing components. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and for pipe sizing. click Close. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and click View. right-click the Systems titlebar. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. otherwise. After you have assigned all components to systems. 10 Using the same methods. TIP If you have multiple views open. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select Level 3 . the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. expand the Unassigned folder. 6 In the Project Browser. If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design floor plan.HVAC Plan . the pipe is associated with that system. After you assign components to a system. and confirm unassigned system components. double-click Level 1 . The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 4 In the System Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 12 In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. right-click Hydronic Return.HVAC Plan . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and click Expand All. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.Design.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .13 Right-click CHWR. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 14 Using the methods that you learned.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Define required lighting.

expand Wiring . For Material. enter THHN. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Click OK. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. ■ ■ For Material. select Copper. For Temperature. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. distribution systems. and demand factors that are applied in the design. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. select Copper. select Wiring Types. Select Correction Factor. click Training Files. ■ Click New Correction Factor. You also add a wiring type. speeding up the design phase. wiring. click (Open). enter 70. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .04.Wire Sizes. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature.rvt. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. As you place components and create circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select 90. enter 1. For Factor.

select 240. enter 250. select Power. enter 120/240. For Minimum.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Neutral Size. select 10000 VA. enter 240. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select 3. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. For Conduit Type. Select Neutral Required. enter 50. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Insulation. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. enter 240. select 120. select Single. enter 2000. select Demand Factors. By specifying a range. select Voltage Definitions. For L-L Voltage. select 75. select Steel. For Neutral Multiplier. Click Split. select THHN. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. Under More Than. For L-G Voltage. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Phase. select Distribution Systems. Click OK. enter 1. select Hot Conductor Size. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Max Size. For Maximum. For Wires. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. enter 220.0. For Value.

You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. For Group Parameter Under.rvt. Under Categories. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. such as offices. select Illuminance. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. restrooms. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. and conference rooms. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Click OK twice. enter Required Lighting Level.Lighting group in the space element properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. Verify that Instance is selected. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. and double-click Level 2 . click Training Files.Lighting Plan. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click (Open). you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Later in the tutorial. For Type of Parameter. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. For Discipline. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. under the Electrical .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.Lighting. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Electrical . select Electrical. 5 In the drawing area. select Spaces. click Add. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.

The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. enter 485. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click Required Lighting Level. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. Click OK.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical . note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. enter Open Office. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New.Lighting. Select Schedule Keys. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and for Key Name. For Name. select Spaces. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. enter Lighting Levels. under Available Fields.

21 Click OK twice.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. change the sort order back to the default setting. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Lighting Plan. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. select Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. for Sorting/Grouping. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Notice that as you enter the data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . click Edit. 22 Using the same method. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. which is mapped to project units.

click (Open). that Required Lighting Level is blank. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Later in this exercise. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise. 27 Click OK. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. select Instruction-Standard. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. for Lighting Levels. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. the value input applies only to the selected space.

and click OK to dismiss the alert message. enter 200. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. verify the By Range is selected. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. enter 800. Under Schemes. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200.00 lx.00. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. for Name. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. click Training Files.00 lx. 00 lx still selected. Select the scheme for At Least 20. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and in the At Least column. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m.00 lx. enter 900. and click (Add Value). for Title.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.00. For example. select Spaces. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. click (Duplicate). and click (Add Value) five times. Select the scheme for 500 lx. enter Required Lighting Levels. and press ENTER. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.rvt. For Color. and press ENTER. click (Add Value) again. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. Select the scheme for 450. for Category. ■ Click OK. select Required Lighting Level. enter Required Lighting and click OK. then the new value will be 400 lx. and press Enter. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown.

select Spaces. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Spaces. For Type. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. and double-click Level 2 . select Required Lighting. Click OK. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. and Required Lighting Level. for Available Fields.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 .Lighting CF. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Color Scheme. 8 In the drawing area. For Name. Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. select Electrical. Name. Average Estimated Illumination. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. double-click Number. select Illuminance.

■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. and click Browse. under Condition. Select Header. select Red. select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format. for Test. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. type a hyphen. for Custom Colors. For Value. Click OK three times. On the Formatting tab. Click Background Color. for Fields. select Required Lighting Level. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.■ For Formula. click Browse. select Level. Click OK. press the spacebar. select Not Between. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Formula. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Blank Line. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Sort by. Click OK twice.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red.

170 .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. First. Then. 171 .Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Create a panel schedule. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design. power circuits. Create power loads. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.

Under Scheme Definition. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click (Open). click Training Files.Lighting Ceiling plan. You can create additional color schemes. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select the color for Less Than 200 lx. select Orange. Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for the Spaces Category. In the Color dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select the color legend. By using orange as the color for this range.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 7 In the Project Browser. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. select Average Estimated Illumination.Lighting CF view is open. for Basic Colors.

5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. which is the lowest value in the specified range.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click the Level 2 . The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.

15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 18 Click to place the fixture.the +/. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. 19 Press ESC to end the command. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . the fixtures will move accordingly.277V. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.5 fc range is satisfied.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

for Name enter and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. scroll to view space space Library 219. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.00 VA. ■ Under Electrical Loads. for Apparent Load. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 162. In the Name dialog. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.

for Type Mark. enter . Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.85. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and receptacles to your design. specify 15000. Placing Switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Under Photometrics. junction boxes. Click OK.93. ■ Click OK twice. 2 In the drawing area. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes. enter F15. select 463T5_S. In the Select File dialog. and Receptacles | 183 . select Luminous Flux.rvt. select T5 [HO]. and click OK. Placing Switches. click Training Files. Junction Boxes. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. you add switches.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise.00 lm. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ Click Apply. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. 9 In space Library 219. for Color Preset. click (Open). for Ballast Loss Factor. select the top center fixture.ies and click Open. select Xenon and click OK. Under Photometrics. for Lamp. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. click the value for Light Loss Factor. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the value for Initial Color. Under Electrical. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Photometrics.

Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.277V. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .

12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 . Select M_Junction Boxes . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Placing Switches.rfa and click Open. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. The element type M_Junction Boxes .

for Mark. In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. Click Edit Type. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. enter 2750. 21 In the drawing area. enter JB-1NL.14 Press ESC to end the command.Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . zoom to space Library 219. 15 Select the junction box. Click OK twice. NOTE When entering values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. note the Number of Poles is 1. for Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical.

Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Space Number. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Click OK. Distribution System. 23 In the System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. 26 In the System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. NOTE If necessary. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Number of Elements. 24 For any column. and Voltage. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Space Name. Select Load. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Select Size. Expand Electrical. Expand General. right-click and click Column Settings.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 31 Close the System Browser.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. and Receptacles | 189 . 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 38 Select the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

43 Press ESC to end the command. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

208V MCB .rvt. and work toward the higher voltage. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . click (Open).equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.Surface: 100A. click Training Files. Adding wiring to a project is optional. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 2 In the drawing area. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. select 120/208 Wye. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter PP-2B.480V MCB . enter LP-2B. for Max. Click OK. for Distribution System.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 8 Select the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 20. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 480/277 Wye. 9 On the Options Bar. #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. For Panel Name. for Max. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. enter 20. 14 Select the panelboard.Loads.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

and for Category. 23 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221. click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. 20 In the drawing area.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch.

rvt. Next you create circuits without showing wire. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. select Wires. except without wire.39 Using the same method. click (Open). click Training Files. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 42 In the Filter dialog. and create permanent wiring. for Hot Conductors. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. enter 2.Loads. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 2 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and for Category. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Click OK. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click Check None.

Expand Electrical. right-click on the Systems heading. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 13 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Click OK. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and verify that Load. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Distribution System. Rating. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Voltage. expand Power. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 22 With the junction box still selected. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. Click Tags. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices.

43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 40 Click OK twice.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 47 In the drawing area. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. click below the first one to place it. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Yes. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. under Identity Data. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Break. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. enter FR4. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . For Circuit Number. click Edit Type. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.

51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. select Lighting Fixture Tags.rfa. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 57 In the Filter dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. click Training Files. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. enter a comma. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. and for Category. Next you create a switch system. Click OK. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click Save. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.rvt. click Check None. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. for File Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 52 In the Save As dialog. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. click (Open). 54 Select all of the tags. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. and click Apply. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area.

enter a. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical Lighting. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. for Switch ID. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Creating a Switch System | 205 .Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.

for switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. under Electrical . enter b.Lighting. Click OK. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.

under Electrical . Click OK. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Loads | 207 . 7 In space Electrical 220. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.rvt. click Check None. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. lighting. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 In the Filter dialog. select Electrical Fixtures. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the PP-2B panel. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Training Files. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and click Element Properties. enter 2. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Click OK. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and for Category. and data systems. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Circuits are used for power. for Hot Conductors.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and in the right pane. and click Open. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. and in the drawing area. select Wiring.13 Select the wire again. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.rfa. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and click to select the circuit. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.

in space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 28 In the drawing area. Creating Power Loads | 209 . click the connector of the first receptacle. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select the PP-2B panel. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. 26 Press Delete.

Next you balance the loads for your design. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.rvt. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. zoom to space Electrical 220. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 1-#12. 1-#10. 2 In the drawing area. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 1-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#10. Had there been a greater imbalance. enter 30A. for Rating. select panel LP-2B. Finally. 6 Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. click Training Files. Click OK. click Rebalance Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. After re-balancing loads. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Scroll down. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. click Open. 3 In the Electrical space. the distribution is shifted. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance.

under Electrical . enter 40A. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. and click OK. enter 25A.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. under Electrical . for Rating. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click OK. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Next you create a panel schedule. 24 Click Select Panel. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 14 Close the warning dialog. 17 Close the warning dialog. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel.Loads.Loads. select the transformer TP-2B. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.

enter 4 mm. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. enter 5 mm. and open E601 . Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Font. expand Sheets (all). under Other. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Edit. click (Open). select Bold and Italic. 4 Close the report. Select PP-2B. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Header Text. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. for Font Size.rvt. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.Panel Schedules. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. for Font Size. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Under Body Text. for Appearance. 6 In the Project Browser. 10 Click OK twice. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. select Berlin Sans FB. Click OK. click Training Files. Under Header Text. The Panel Schedule Report displays.

and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. In the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. press TAB once. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. select space Lounge 212.rvt. click Training Files. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. each with a load of 180VA. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. Expand Unassigned. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. click (Open).

15 In the dialog. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. zoom to space Electrical 214. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 17 In the drawing area. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 16 Close the details dialog. In the System Browser. Checking Your Design | 215 . Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. select MDP-1. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. under Warnings.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and click OK. click Duplicate. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Sanitary. planning is critical to a successful design. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and verify that Level 1 . right-click PVC . click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Design is open. in addition to loading existing families. and click Properties.rvt.Plumbing Plan . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Adding a pipe size. 4 In the Name dialog. In this lesson. type PVC . you create a PVC pipe type.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Vent. In this exercise. 219 .

For Offset. select Tee. for Nominal. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.293 mm.Vent is listed.PVC . select None. and click OK. 21 In the right pane. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.000 mm.Sch 40 . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select M_Tee Sanitary . enter 46. 25 For Outside. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.006 mm. 24 For Inside Diameter. and click Main.Sch 40 .PVC . 27 For the new pipe size. under Mechanical. click Pipe Settings. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . Cross. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . click Training Files. enter 54. select Branch. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 18 For System Type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. enter 10°. click Modify. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 6 Click OK. 10 On the Selection panel.5 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV: Standard. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 For System Type. 22 Click New Size. enter 45. select Plastic. 17 In the left pane. select Sanitary. for Material. and open Metric\M_Trap P . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Types.DWV: Standard. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. enter -1250. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 26 Click OK. Tap. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Sch 40 .DWV.PVC . In the Project Browser. select Sanitary.rfa. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Tee. 13 In the right panel.

Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. vent. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the cold water system. Create the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the sanitary plumbing system. including plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. sanitary piping. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

a toilet. and click OK. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base is placed. as shown. select one of the components in the system. A preview of the piping layout displays. select Sanitary 107. for example.

click Solutions. You accept this suggested solution. select Main. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. enter -1225. and modify it to meet project requirements. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The default settings are automatically modified. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .19 On the Options Bar. 23 For Pipe Type. enter -350 mm. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 24 For Offset. for Slope. 30 Click Modify.05%.Sanitary. for Solution Type. select 100 mm. and for Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter 1. 26 For Pipe Type. select PVC . 21 On Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 28 On the Options Bar. and click Settings. 25 In the left pane. select PVC . it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 29 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Diameter.Sanitary. select Branch. 27 For Offset. select Intersections. enter -350 mm. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 34 Click Modify. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown.33 In the 3D view.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method.

When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Overall. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .

Public. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 560 mmx560 mm . in the Type Selector. as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel. under M_Lavatory . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. and verify that Level 1 . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 On the Element panel.Design is open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Rectangular.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. enter 711. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink. select Multiple. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .2. 8 Select the sink.7 Click Modify. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.

■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. click Add To System. and press Enter to create the third sink. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Press Esc. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.2. enter 711.

under Design ➤ Plumbing . 21 Select the tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. as shown.Overall.Design ➤ 3D Views. 20 Select the fitting.16 On the Edit System panel. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. click Finish Editing System. double-click 3D Plumbing . use the ViewCube to orient the view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.

24 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting.22 In the plan view. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and click to draw the pipe. for Offset. for Slope. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1. and click Draw Pipe. with the tee fitting selected. enter 760 mm. and click Apply. press Spacebar.05%. 27 Click Modify.

select Standard. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . click to place the fitting.DWV.PVC . 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 29 In the Type Selector.

37 Select the fitting. on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to open the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and press Enter. enter 305 mm. and click Draw Pipe. zoom in to the double wye fitting. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 36 In the section view. In the next steps. 34 Press Esc. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. right-click the right connector. for Offset.

as shown. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. and click to place the pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. 46 In the section view. press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. 49 Using the same method. and press Esc. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. enter 150 mm.

and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 51 In the Type Selector.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 56 Using the same method. select Standard. 55 In the 3D view. under M_Trap P .PVC .Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 53 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left. 54 Click Modify. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.DWV. 52 In the plan view.

enter 150 mm. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. In the plan view. connect the right sink to the double wye. and click Draw Pipe.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. Click Modify. and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. select the left P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Move the cursor to the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Click in the plan view.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select a proposed solution.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. under Pipe Types. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. On the Routing Solutions panel. Press Esc. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.

61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. for Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify the slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Training Files.05% is selected. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 62 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. click Finish. verify that 1. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

3 In the Section view. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Design. right-click the top connector.Floor level line. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.PVC . click Modify. select the elbow fitting on the right.Design. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Sch 40 . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select Standard. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 7 On the Selection panel. as shown. 10 In the 3D view. 5 Select the tee.DWV. and click Draw Pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the vertical stack.Overall.Plumbing Plan . and click to draw the pipe. 9 In the Type Selector. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click the intersection to place the fitting. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

click Training Files.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. 267 . You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. However. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can choose to save your work.rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. After finishing each exercise. and click Duplicate. If the tutorial training files are not present. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this tutorial. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type. 2 Right-click Standard. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. In this lesson. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. go to http://www. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

For Pipe Type. verify that 2800 is specified. For System Type. and then click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. or architectural components. For System Type. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Material. verify that 2800 is selected. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. For Pipe Type. However. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. under Mechanical. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you modify the type properties of the pipe. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. and click Properties. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). structural beams. select Carbon Steel. you create project parameters and work with schedules. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. In the left pane. Next. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. duct. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise. For Offset. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. select Main. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 9 Click OK. click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Zone 1. enter Sprinkler Zone. 8 Using a crossing window. click Training Files. right-click. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . When you highlight a space using the cursor.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Piping Plan . under Fire Protection. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and then click OK. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. select the upper half of the building. and click Element Properties. select space Instruction 221 as shown. Under Categories. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 6 In the drawing area. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. for Sprinkler Zone. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 5 Click OK twice. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Spaces. for Name. For Group parameter under. click Add. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Fire Protection. the space crossing lines display.

including a calculated value parameter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool.rvt. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK. to which you add various parameters. click Training Files. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Zone 2. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Using the same method. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. for Sprinkler Zone. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 In the Filter dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection.

For Unit symbol. Obstructed-Combustible. and click Field Format. 7 Click OK. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. and on the ribbon. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. For Key name. The schedule displays.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Group parameter under. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. enter Maximum Spacing. select Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .Fire Protection Piping Plan . Select Schedule keys. enter Light. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 14 Select the new header. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. 9 On the Formatting tab. click the Formatting tab. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Maximum Spacing. select Length. select Millimeters. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select 0 decimal places. For Name. For Type of Parameter. 6 Using the same method. For Units. click Add Parameter. For Rounding. Click OK. Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Fire Protection. select mm. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 10 In the Format dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. double-click on each column separator. enter Protection Area Construction Type.

enter 40. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter 4575. Click OK. 16 Using the same method. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. and press Enter. select Spaces.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.

select 0 decimal place. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. For Formula.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select Number. enter Minimum Sprinklers. under Available fields. select Fixed. For Rounding. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 20 On the Formatting tab. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. select Area. In the Fields dialog. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. and click Field Format. For Units. 22 Click OK twice. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. and click OK. For Discipline. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Common. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Type. click .

On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. At the bottom of the dialog. select Grand totals. For Fields. and select Totals only. select Hidden field. click Edit. under Other.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. and then select Hidden field. Select Header and Blank line. For Then by. select Sprinkler Zone. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. Under Field formatting. select Level. select Number. and click View Properties. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Select Header and Blank line. 26 Click OK 3 times. for Sort by. for Sorting/Grouping. select Sprinkler Zone. and then click Field Format. verify that Use default settings is selected. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ In the Format dialog. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Sprinklers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Formatting tab. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Available fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and Count. and click View Properties. for Embedded Schedule. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. right-click the schedule. for Filter by. select Level equals Level 2. click Edit. for Filter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and select Totals only. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. System Name. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. double-click Type. select Embedded Schedule. and click View Properties. delete the word Maximum. Under Field formatting. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Count. select Grand totals. for Fields. click Edit.27 In the drawing area. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 30 Click OK twice. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. under Other. select Calculate totals. For Category. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell.

but their values are not determined. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 Click OK. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click FP . Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. 48 In the floor plan. and click OK.Fire Protection Plan Design. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. under Identity Data. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Unobstructed. 43 Click Cancel. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . As a result. select Light. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select space 221 Instruction. for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. and access the instance properties. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. 41 In the plan view. for Protection Area Construction Type.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. At the end of this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. As you place the sprinklers. go to http://www. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. After finishing each exercise.rvt. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. click Training Files. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory.autodesk. However. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. If the tutorial training files are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will understand the process. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you can choose to save your work. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. 279 . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2 . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the system.

After placing the initial sprinkler. When this happens. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. When there is a small misalignment.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.

Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 11 In the drawing area.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Also. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice. select the sprinklers that you placed. 206. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 9 In space Instruction 202. and 207.

Design.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. open Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. 18 Type WT. 200B. specify a vertical offset. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. as shown. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and 200C). Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Fire Protection Piping Plan . you place non-hosted sprinklers. 17 In the Project Browser. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next.

You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and with piping (physical connection).19 In the floor plan. This number is determined in the schedule. you adjust the offset. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. Next. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. move the cursor to the right. Notice that the schedule updates.0. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. In the next exercise. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 25 Click OK. In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. under Constraints. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and click Element Properties. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Press Esc. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 2900 mm. and press Enter. enter 11. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . After creating the logical connection. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. enter 4100. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. for Offset. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .FP_Ceiling view. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. For Number. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.

pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. click View ➤ Systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and select Piping. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. However. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Right-click the header. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Unlike logical connections (systems).Fire Protection Plan . as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.rvt. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.

11 With the system still selected. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. select an initial piping layout. and select the system. Next. press Tab. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. named Fire Protection Wet. and click Select. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. within the Piping Systems folder. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. indicating the logical connection. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet .8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. In the System Browser. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

enter FP Wet_Zone2. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. for Diameter. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 In the System Browser.Wet is selected. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. When the layout is finished. system equipment. as shown.0 is specified. 15 In the drawing area. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for System Name. click Place Base. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). In the left pane. 14 Click Finish Editing System. select 150 mm. 23 For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. For Offset. select Branch. and on the Options Bar. For Pipe Type. providing system editing tools. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and number of elements in the system. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 22 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 19 Click OK. verify that 2800.The Edit Piping System panel displays. click Solutions. click Settings. enter -3650. verify that Main is selected. and a piping layout preview displays.

27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. A (parallel movement control) displays. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. verify that Network is selected. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. and green represents branch lines). and select solution 4. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. In general. Creating a Piping System | 287 .25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.

as shown. 32 If necessary. 29 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection.

1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. Next. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 3 If necessary. 2 Zoom in.Fire Protection Piping Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .rvt. and various manual pipe creation tools. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select the elbow fitting as shown.33 Close the file with or without saving it. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . the Connect Into tool.

and so on) are logically connected by a system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. you can select the pipe or duct. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. click Add To System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. mechanical equipment. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and pipe or duct is created. air terminals. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. radiators. 8 In the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 5 In the drawing area.

22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 14 Close the System Browser.11 On the Generate Layout panel. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. and then tile the views. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and select solution 5. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . for Solution Type. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. 13 Click Finish Layout. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. verify that Network is selected.

draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. right-click.24 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 Select the sprinkler. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 29 Using the same method. select 2800.

5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.rvt. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. select 1 : 50. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 4 On the Options Bar. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Because the whole system highlights. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Scale. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 31 In the plan view.Design is highlighted.

8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .6 Press Esc. and click View Properties. double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.

10 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan .9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. for View Name. and press Enter. select MEP Section. and then click Modify. 17 Move the cursor up. For View Classification. 14 Select the tee fitting.Design the active view. 22 In the drawing area. For Default View Template.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. Click OK.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design. 15 Press Spacebar. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . and click Apply Default View Template. 13 Select the elbow fitting. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. for Sub-Discipline. enter 2135. and then right-click the top connector. Under Identity Data. enter FP Section_Stair. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Pipe. select Design. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. right-click Design ➤ FP . drag the top section boundary line up. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 19 Make Level 2 . select FP . 12 If necessary. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

24 Select the cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down.23 In the section view. for Diameter. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). select . right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. and then click Modify. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 25 Verify that Fire Protection .

50 mm is selected. and then click Modify. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. as shown.rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.29 Close the section view. and click Open. 32 In the Open dialog. 31 In the alert dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . verify that M_Gate Valve . click Yes to load a family. 33 In the Type Selector. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.

you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. click Training Files. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt.

and click OK. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 7 On the Options Bar. 4 In the floor plan view. or width. or height. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. select 25mm. for Diameter. Changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. width. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. click Check None. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. height. width. 8 Click Modify. 6 In the Filter dialog. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately.

17 On the View Control Bar. . Clear Leader. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. Press Esc. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. select the linked architectural file. They display only in the view in which they were placed. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. and click Open. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor.rfa. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 In the 3D view. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and after each segment highlights. NOTE Tags are view specific. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . By hiding the linked file.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. click to place the tag. 12 If necessary.

press Tab. 21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. select 100mm. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. and when the section highlights. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

for Diameter. and then tag the piping as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter is modified. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 40mm. 23 Close the 3D view.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. as shown. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. you created a wet fire protection system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You added tags to pipes. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . For additional practice. In this exercise. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

304 .

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

If the view included detail graphics.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. 307 . You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 In the Project Browser. dependent views. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and view references. matchlines. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.rvt.

select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. more focused. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and then press Esc. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 6 In the Project Browser. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. and click OK. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. create dependent views for areas B and C. 7 Close the file without saving. 10 In the drawing area. 9 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. views and put them on the sheet. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 4 Using the same method.rvt. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. click Training Files.

For Line Weight. 13 Press Esc twice. select Double Dash . Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 14 Click Finish Matchline. and then press Esc. In the Color dialog. click the current value. 19 In the drawing area. Click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 11. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select black. For Line Pattern.

21 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .20 Select the upper view reference and. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. for Target view. on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. click Training Files. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 4 In the Project Browser. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and zoom to each of the view references. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. select Plumbing Isometric. 2 Zoom in. For Default View Template. enter Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water. right-click 3D Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. for View Name. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and select the section box.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 27 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. and then click OK. For Sub-Discipline. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. Click OK. and click to select it. 10 Right-click.Domestic Water. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. select Dash. select Plumbing.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select 3. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. For Pattern. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. right-click Plumbing Isometric . select Documentation. 6 In the Project Browser. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. for View Classification. The section crop lines no longer display. and click Apply Default View Template. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element.

and click to select it. 13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 15 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

For Slope. and in the view properties. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 19 Using methods learned previously. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and for Default View Template. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. verify that Common is selected. specify Plumbing . Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units.16 Press Esc. click on the Format value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select 1.5mm Arial.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar.Isometric. and in the Type Selector.

click Training Files. for Rounding. and click to place the spot slope annotation. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. select To the nearest 10. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 26 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. you use a plan view to create a callout view. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 22 Click OK twice. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.■ In the Format dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.

5 On the Options Bar. select 1 : 50. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. for Scale.

drag it to the sheet. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5. under Sheets (all). using the same method. for Line Weight. double-click M601 . Click OK. and select the viewport. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 13 In the Project Browser.

15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Title on Sheet. For Default View Template. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. Creating Callout Views | 319 . enter WSHP PART PLAN. for View Name. 17 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template.

21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section.

The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click Rename. and click OK.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser. under Names. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

322 .

rvt.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. linetypes. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. as shown. work with model-based components. duct tags. symbols. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Annotations In this exercise. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and annotation to create a legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 323 .

324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 Press Esc twice. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and select 1. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 With the text still selected. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).

The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a return diffuser. select a supply diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Annotations | 325 . Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. as shown.

verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.17 Click Modify. as shown.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 24 On the Options Bar. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. and click OK. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog. under Category. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. clear Leader. 22 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 25 In the drawing area. and click Open. If necessary. for Ducts. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. click Load. 21 In the Load Family dialog.

30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.26 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 327 . select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Leader. select Horizontal. 32 In the drawing area.

36 Press Esc twice. for Leader. as shown. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

37 In the drawing area. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. That’s because you changed a type property. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and all elements of that type are affected. and click OK. click Training Files. for Leader Arrowhead. you use temporary dimensions to locate. Creating Dimensions | 329 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. not simply an instance property. select the last tag placed. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. lay out. and lock lighting fixtures. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 40 Using the method learned previously. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.

12 Click EQ. On the Options Bar. select the dimension line. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. and then select the interior face of the wall. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Press Esc. 14 Using the same method. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.

annotation symbols. Creating a Legend In this exercise. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.9). Because the dimensions are locked. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the 3 interior locks on the line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. 20 Using the same methods. and offset them from the wall. enter 2430. 17 Press Esc. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. and notes. linework.rvt.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. click Training Files. Creating a Legend | 331 .

200 Neck. 10 Using the same method. click below the title to place the diffuser. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Diffuser Legend.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . ■ 9 In the drawing area. For Scale. 5 Click in the drawing area. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser .Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select 1 : 50. Click OK. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select 1. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. For View. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Floor Plan.

annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 333 . click next to the top diffuser.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.11 Press Esc.

18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. The selected detail lines are now thin. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 21 Press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and then press Esc.DROP and its text note. 24 Select the component’s break line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

enter E. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 335 . 34 Using the method learned previously. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

and select Title w Line . 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting view using detail components. 337 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and text. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. click Training Files. detail groups.113 East elevation view. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail.rvt. A detail callout that references another view. indicating that it’s the active view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .

Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click to place it.113 East on the sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Using the same method. and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. select each of the 2 panelboards. Next. place Power Riser . 4 On the Options Bar. clear Leader.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 5 In the drawing area.

Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc. select the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. giving the appearance of a single view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click OK. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. under Identity Data. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click.

you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. select the 113 East elevation view.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 22 Press Esc. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Activate View. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. In the next exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. as shown. and select Title w Line . right-click. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

click Training Files. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. for Line Weight. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . select 6. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. enter Electrical Power. 8 On the Options Bar. notice that there are no snaps active. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.rvt. for Name. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. as shown. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Under Modify Subcategories. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 9 Beginning at the transformer. 2 Close the Project Browser. click New. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Chain is selected. expand Lines.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. In the Line Styles dialog.113 North view. In the New Subcategory dialog. As you draw. and then click OK.

10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. enter 3mm. as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 11 Using the same method. for Offset. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 On the Options Bar. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .

as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

select Multiple. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 28 Click above the cap. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and select 1. 29 Click Modify. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

Using the same method. Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and press Enter. enter 12. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . click on the length dimension value. enter 7. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 3. and press Enter. 40 Press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and then press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. you can ensure that they stay together. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.0. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. You enter exact values for each line length. change the length of the bottom line to 3.

and then press Esc. and click OK. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 47 In the drawing area. 46 In the Project Browser. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. enter Ground. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 52 Select the detail group. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 51 Using the method learned previously. select all 3 lines. 54 Select the group. for Name. 50 With the group selected.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. while pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

59 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and will place it on sheet E01. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. In later exercises. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).

expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and double click Typical Make Up Air. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and click OK. 5 Right-click the copy. and click Apply View Template. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and Left sides converge. select 3D Views. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and then click the corner where the Top. Walkthroughs.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and then press Esc. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. 3 Select the section box. and click Rename. click Home. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. 4 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. click Training Files. 8 On the ViewCube.rvt. Back. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser.

15 Using the same method. Typical. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right).■ ■ Under Names. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select 3D HVAC Iso. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor down and to the left. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click OK. and click to specify the second leader point. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. To rotate and reposition a text label.18 Press Esc. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click on the crop region. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. as shown. and under Extents. and then click OK. 19 Complete the text labels.

33 Right-click the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.25 Click OK. click Training Files. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Activate View. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 32 In the Instance Properties. scroll down. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 29 Right click the view. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m.rvt. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. Place a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select Crop View and Section Box. and click Deactivate View. 30 On the View Control Bar. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and click View Properties.

For Scale. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. as the rectangle start point. select Documentation. select 1 : 5. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click the point at the top of the drain. and click Properties. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. right-click the view name. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 9 Zoom in to the component. 13 In the drawing area. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. For View Classification. select Plumbing. 12 On the Element panel. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. as shown. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK.

for Type. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. select C. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .P. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 18 With the filled region still selected. and then press Esc. 22 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.

34 Press Esc. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 31 On the Options Bar. 23 In the drawing area. (Line). 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and then click to select them.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select the filled region. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 28 Click Modify. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

40 Click Finish Region. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

draw wide detail lines as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 52 In the Create Group dialog.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.. for Name. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 49 Click Modify. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 45 Using the method learned previously. and click OK. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. enter Flashing Membrane_F. and then click to select them. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.D. (Rectangle). select the Flashing Membrane group. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 61 Using the same method. as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown. press Spacebar twice. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 55 Press Esc.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.

as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. and use the grips to resize the masking region.62 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.

Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 71 Click Modify. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. and then click OK.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 72 If necessary. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. select 15000 (Division 15 . Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing.70 In the Keynotes dialog. and click to specify the second leader point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the text insertion point. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and then press Esc twice. select the view title. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

364 .

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->